Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

1 .Introduction In this tutorial. Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

Add basic MEP elements. and piping. and plumbing fixtures. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. electrical panels. such as mechanical equipment. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. 3 . The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add more detailed modelling elements. and plumbing engineering workflows. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Germany. fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. such as duct.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.

Metric file names have an _m suffix. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. However. After completing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. For example. For example. When you install the training files as instructed. Create detail views. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Contact your CAD manager for more information. annotations. as well as how to open and save them. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Create schedules. you learn where the training files are located. NOTE Depending on your installation. So. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. such as templates and families.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. your Training folder may be in a different location. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . When you open a training file. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. however. On the Contents tab. You do not design entire systems. and sheets to document the project. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. In this exercise. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Metric: files for users working with metric units. to provide a richer and more finished design. and tags. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. templates. views. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. is located and accessed in the training files location. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. when you add ductwork. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

select the folder in which to save the new file. and you can open any supported file type. you are prompted to save the changes. click ➤ Save As. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. scroll down.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. For File name. 8 If you have made changes. Accessing Training Files | 5 . a list of file types displays.rvt. verify that Project Files (*. 3 In the right pane. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Imperial or Metric. if you open settings. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. and click Open. and click the Training Files icon. and click Save. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. the Open dialog displays.rvt and make changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.rvt) is selected. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. enter the new file name. For Files of type. For example. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. You may close the file with or without saving changes. 4 Click the training file name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.

6 .

every drawing sheet. drawings. ■ ■ 7 . and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. hence. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. quantities. In the Revit MEP model. scope. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In this case. schedules.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and plans. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. If you move the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. If the length of the elevation is changed. the floor or roof remains connected. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. 2D and 3D view. and phases when you need it. You learn the terminology. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In this case. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the operation of the software is parametric. sections. and schedules required for a building project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the hierarchy of elements. drawing sheets.

The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and electrical panels. For example. levels. sinks. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. walls and ceilings are hosts. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. dimensions. sinks. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. sprinklers.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sprinklers. Examples include detail lines. When you change something. tags. ducts. For example. For example. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. They help to describe or document the design. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. filled regions. boilers. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. tags. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and electrical panels. boilers. and 2D detail components. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and keynotes are annotation elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. grids. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ducts. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . dimensions. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site.

you do nothing to establish these relationships. For example. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. top of wall. This information includes components used to design the model. such as roofs. Understanding the Concepts | 9 .This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. floors. first floor. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. elevation views. you can explicitly control them. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. for example. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and drawings of the design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The project file contains all information for the building design.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Project: In Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. programming is not required. By using a single project file. schedules. In Revit MEP. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. section views. from geometry to construction data. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and ceilings. and so forth). industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Most often. and types. or bottom of foundation. North . categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. If you can draw. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. you must be in a section or elevation view. In other cases. Often. To place levels. families. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. views of the project. However. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure.

and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can also display several project views at one time. or layer the views to see only the one on top. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. For example. A type can also be a style. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Type: Each family can have several types. hiding. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. With a few clicks. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. pipes. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Unlike system and standard component families. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example. For example. Then experiment with them.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and wires. However. identical use. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. each in-place family contains only a single type. System families can be transferred between projects. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. System families include ducts. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. showing. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and similar graphical representation. such as a A0 title block. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. A type can be a specific size of a family. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.

you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 .Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.

tools used for managing and modifying the current view. project and system parameters. and settings. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and CAD files. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. then select what you want to modify.. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.. select the tool first. tools used for editing existing elements. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. data and systems. and for switching views. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. When working on the Modify tab. architect-specific tools.

Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. displays frequently used tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. By default. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides requested information. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. when adding duct.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. For example. closes the application menu (double-click). To keep a panel expanded. provides access to common tools. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).

. select a template and create a new drawing. select a file to open. (Export) On the application menu.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Open) save the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. such as Export and Publish.

or template file. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Publish) print the current drawing. Camera.. annotation. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. publish the current project.. annotation.On the application menu.. and Walkthrough. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. to. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. click. family. To enable or disable a tool item.. family. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. (Licensing) close the file. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Print) access product and license information. saves a current project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. provides views including Default 3D. but is not enabled by default.

these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. or the Family Editor. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Starting with the most recent command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view.To undo or redo a series of operations. When you are using a command. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. In addition. When you are highlighting an element or component. Clipboard. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Group. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Modify. check the Status Bar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. To show the Status Bar again. when you switch to another editing mode. To hide the Status Bar. repeat the command. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. However. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. This displays the command history in a list. workshared components. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. displaying the same information. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Clear the Status Bar check mark. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode.

To cancel or exit the current command. for example. On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. To change existing elements to a different type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. When you place an element in a drawing. click (Modify). Place a Wall. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type.

(The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 1 Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. click Training Files. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. For example. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are several ways to access zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. In the following steps.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.

click . NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Modifying the View | 19 . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. In the drawing area. 6 Click in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 9 To display SteeringWheels. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. To modify or add snap increments.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. on the Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). use a zoom menu command to zoom out.

click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. and click tin the Options dialog. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Click and drag to orbit the design. and then using the Zoom tool again. ➤ Options. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. press ESC. moving the wheel to the desired location. As you move the mouse.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Enter ZR. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. bottoms. Similar controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. referred to as shape handles. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. and select the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. as shown. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. display along the ends. called drag controls. Small blue dots.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. After you are familiar with these tasks. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. These are the drag controls. and open Level 2 .HVAC Plan .

click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All changes you make to a project are tracked. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. 6 On the Undo menu. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. In this example. click the Undo command. select the first item in the list. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. on the Standard toolbar.

and click again to specify the ending position. and drag it to the left as shown. you want to move the duct. for example. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.Some commands. as shown. click to specify the starting position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. In this case. require 2 clicks to complete the command. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . After selecting the element to move.

under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. such as the Modify Ducts command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Return. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Press ESC twice.End a command Some commands. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Supply. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 14 Enter VG. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. For example. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 13 To end a command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

select Project. 6 Click OK.rte template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. New projects inherit all the families. 27 . such as coordination review and interference checking. click Training files. Finally. link files. under Create new. and open Metric ➤ Templates. such as ducts and pipes. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). create and manage views. You can either select a template from the template library. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. 7 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. In that case.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as the default project units and settings. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and geometry from the starting template. system families. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 5 In the New Project dialog. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. use copy/monitor. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you learn how to start a project from a template. under Template file. and open North. and loadable families. and modify system settings. the default building levels and standard views. You can choose from several templates. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and click Open. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.

select Level 1. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. For example. for City. review the construction materials listed.8 In the drawing area. select Manchester. click Browse. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. ■ ■ Under Create new. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Click OK twice. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. (Browse). 10 Using the same method. Click Cancel. navigate to Metric Templates. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Click OK. In the Choose Template dialog. If you want to use a template other than the default. click Edit. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. under Energy Analysis. you can select it now. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. NH. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Project template. select School or University. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Location. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify.rte template and click Open. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. create another new project using the Construction template. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. ■ For Building Construction. When you select the material. for Energy Data. click (Browse).

For Ground Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. and 310. click Sizes. click Round. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 110. 23 In the left pane. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa and click Open. for 90. 25 In the left pane. 140. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Rectangular. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. 260. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 290. wiring. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Click OK twice. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and demand factors for electrical systems. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 22 In the right pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. under Duct Settings. piping. under Pipe Settings.00 mm. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and 140. 26 In the right pane. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.00 mm.00 mm. Holding CTRL. 24 In the right pane.00 mm. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. under Duct Settings. for 90. 110. select Views.00 mm. select Identity Data. for 20. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Wiring.00 mm. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .000 mm. power distribution systems. For Categories. 33 Click OK.00 mm. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. plumbing. and fire protection systems.00 mm.

sheets. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Sub-Discipline. 5 Click OK. click Browse. select View Name. select Project. Click Open. In addition. Notice that the file is saved as a template. For Then by. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system.rvt. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. From the Positioning list. under Create new. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. and groups that are contained in a project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog.Origin to Origin. 2 In the New Project dialog. You need to create the MEP model for the project. To enable this coordination. select Associated Level. under Template file. click Training. For Sort by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. select Family and Type. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. families. 38 Close the file. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Auto . You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.

12 Click OK. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Room Bounding.Mech. 8 If necessary. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. select the linked architectural model. Linking Projects | 31 . reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. under Constraints.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active.

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 19 On the left side of the view. click the level line for 03. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. click Plan View types. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.Floor. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

click By Host View. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 34 On the Basics tab. If you modify a monitored element. appears above the copied elements. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. for the link file. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. a warning message displays. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. and click to select the linked model. Linking Projects | 33 . After copying. 29 In the drawing area. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Custom. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. highlight the linked model. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. 27 In the drawing area. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. warnings notify you of any violations. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. level 3. and that the copied elements are monitored. indicating that a relationship is established. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. click Custom. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. indicating that an element has changed. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.

Planting. under View Properties. 3 In the View templates dialog. Click OK. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . deselect Levels. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Edit. Roads. Site. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. select Custom. click Custom.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. for the link file.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 5 On the Basics tab. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Under Visibility. 36 Click OK. Select Show categories from all disciplines. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Custom. 7 Click OK twice. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. deselect Parking. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. and Topography. for Name. Click OK. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog.

System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click the Graphics tab. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. notification preferences. Modifying System Settings | 35 . and click OK. 7 Click OK. click Browse. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 3 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. 9 In the Options dialog. 8 Click ➤ Options. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. under Template file. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. select Invert background color. click Training Files. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. journal cleanup options. 2 In the Options dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. selection default options.rte. under View Templates. These settings control the graphics. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. select Mechanical and click OK. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Notice that the drawing area is black.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. they are not saved to project files or template files. and your username when using worksharing.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .10 Under Colors. 18 Select the wall. However. you specify default file locations. When an error occurs. select One hour. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. For Tooltip assistance. select yellow. and family libraries. 12 Click the General tab. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click the value for Selection color. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 21 Close the file without saving it. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 13 Under Notifications. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 14 Click OK. 17 Press ESC to end the command. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. and click OK. the elements causing the error display using this color. 2 In the Options dialog. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. including your default project template. select None. family template files. click the File Locations tab. 11 In the Color dialog. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.

click Browse. 10 In the Places dialog. and you can create new libraries. you can start a new project with that template. select the folder to save your files to by default. under Default path for family template files. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Click and click Browse to select a template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 5 Under Default path for user files. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. When you are opening. saving. Save. and Import dialogs. centralized. 7 In the Options dialog. TIP To view a template. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. ➤ New ➤ Project. note the list of library names. In the following illustration. This path is set automatically during the installation process. You can modify the existing library names and path. click Places. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog.3 Under Default template file. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. However. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Browse. such as in a large. Specifying File Locations | 37 . and click Open. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Load. 8 Click Cancel. 4 Click Cancel. click Browse. or loading a Revit MEP file.

and change the name to My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click the My Library icon. and Import dialogs. Save. click My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 15 Under Library Name. templates. and click (Browse). ➤ Open. and click Open. and select it as the library path. click (Add Value). and click OK twice. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Load. or families. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.11 In the Places dialog.

19 Click Cancel. such as bump maps. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 5 In the text editor. click Edit. click the Spelling tab. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 3 Under Settings. view the current path. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 11 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 22 Select My Library. If you work in a large office. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 12 Create a new project using the default template. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click OK. 20 Click ➤ Options. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. This path is determined during installation. 21 On the File Locations tab. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and decal image files. custom color files. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. click Places. 27 Click OK. enter sheetmtl-Cu. select Ignore words in uppercase. click Edit. 9 In the text editor. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. If you want to relocate this path. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. specify the new location here. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 Click in the drawing area. 2 In the Options dialog.

You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 25 Close the file without saving it. 18 Click ➤ Options. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Edit.17 In the Spelling dialog. click Close. under Dimension Snaps.. As you zoom in and out within a view. 2 In the New Project dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . click Browse. click the Spelling tab. click Restore Defaults. 20 Under Settings. you modify snap increments. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. work with snapping turned off. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 22 In the text editor. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. 23 In the text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and enter 500 . click Training Files. delete sheetmtl-CU. 4 In the New Project dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK. under Template file. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 24 In the Options dialog. 19 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 6 In the Snaps dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. you modify snap settings.rte. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 21 Under Personal dictionary. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise.

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and move the cursor to the right. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. click OK. zoom out until it does so. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If you do not have a wheel button. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not. For example.7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. TIP To zoom while sketching. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. use the wheel button on your mouse. such as ZO to zoom out. enter SM. This is the increment that you added previously. 10 On the Options Bar. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. deselect Chain. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.

If you move the cursor along the wall. 26 Close the file. 22 Move the cursor downward. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. with or without saving it. 25 Click OK. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the midpoint. and delete the value 500 . the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and move the cursor to the right.. 19 Enter SM. and specify the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Do not set the wall end point. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and the wall edges.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

However. methodology. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you can choose to save your work. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. If the tutorial training files are not present. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. By following the recommended workflow. This system consists of a cooling tower. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 45 . you design a mechanical system for an office building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you first configure the linked architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. you first plan the system. After applying a color scheme to the zones. As you create the mechanical system. you will understand the process. At the end of the tutorial. go to http://www. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. and then you create a plenum level.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this exercise. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. duct system and a hydronic piping system. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. In this lesson.

This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 6 In the Project Browser. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. Next. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and after the linked model highlights. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to select it. and double-click West . 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you add a level for plenums. and click OK.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Constraints. NOTE When working with a linked file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. click Training Files. These components are defined in the architectural training file.MEP. roof.rvt. In this section. not in the MEP training file. select Room Bounding. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. ceilings. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m.

9 On the Draw panel. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). For Offset. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and click Properties. and click OK. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Preparing Spaces | 47 . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Plenum. enter 2600mm. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. The new level is placed. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Click Plan View Types. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 16 Press Esc.

In this exercise. select Design. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 20 In the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for View Scale. For Cut plane.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. In this exercise. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. For Sub-Discipline. select MEP .Plenum. and then place spaces in various types of areas. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and for Offset. However. select Level Above (Level 3). it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. for Default View Template. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and click Apply Default View Template. Under Extents. for View Range. For View Classification. In the next exercise. for Top. you place spaces in areas of the building model. Under Identity Data. click Edit. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the site plan displays in the view. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. enter 0. Under View Depth. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum Plan. enter an Offset of 300mm. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE After finishing each exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . ■ Click OK twice. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. for Level.

indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. select Level 2 Plenum. Placing Spaces | 49 . This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Offset. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For (Tag Location). walls. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select New. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Upper Limit. click Training Files. enter 0. and ceilings). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. For Space. select Horizontal. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.

enter Library. 9 Select the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. For Name. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 14 In the drawing area. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). ensuring coordination between the files.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. for Number. enter 219. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.7 Click to place the space. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. For Offset. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space. and then click Modify. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. select Level 3. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Upper Limit. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.

25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 23 Click OK. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. you place a space in a large corridor area.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and for Offset. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. for Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. enter 0.rvt. select Level 3. and then press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click in the name column. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 9 In the schedule. and select Corridor. 10 Click in the number column. and scroll to the newly placed space. which was numbered 219Q. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. In the schedule. and change the space number to 216A.7 In the Project Browser.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. as shown. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 11 Close the schedule view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. If necessary. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.

and click Element Properties. for Upper Limit. select Roof Level. 10 In the plan view. For Offset. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 6 Enter VG. select Level 3. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and then click OK. right-click. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select the space. enter 0. 12 Click in the section view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Enter WT to tile the views. In the plan view. On the Options Bar. select Interior and Reference. for Upper Limit. expand Spaces. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.4 Press Esc. click in the chase area to place the space.

enter 225PC. Under Identity Data. 15 Press Esc. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and click OK. Bounding elements (such as walls. floors.■ For Limit Offset. For Number. ceilings. for Name. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 1200. 17 Type ZF. All spaces in the view are tagged. enter Chase. under Loaded Tags. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. and maximize the view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Space Plan. ■ ■ 14 Click OK.

The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. click View ➤ Zones. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. To display space reference lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog.20 Close the file with or without saving it. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. which removes the space from the Default zone. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. In the next exercises. click Reference. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. After a space is placed in an area.Zoning is highlighted. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. indicating that it’s the active view. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. click Training Files. under Spaces. it is automatically added to the Default zone.

You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. indicating that the space is occupiable. you assign spaces to zones in the building. To display space reference lines. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and a new zone is created. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. the Edit Zone tab displays. select Occupiable. you assign spaces to a zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. As you do this. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The graphic in the System Browser updates.Zoning is highlighted. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click 121 Cafeteria. click Reference. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . click Training Files. Next. under Spaces. and click OK. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. under Energy Analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Zone tool is active. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. ) or 5 In the System Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone.

select HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you need to activate the zone visibility. Click OK. To view the zone in the drawing area. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 4 In the drawing area. Instruction 221. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. type VG. Expand HVAC Zones. and Electrical 220 spaces. select Computer Lab 222. In the System Browser. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Using the Edit Zone tab. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Instruction.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 5 With the drawing area active. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and click Finish Editing Zone. and modify the zone properties.

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. for Name. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. To display space reference lines. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Zoning view to activate it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand 2 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . click Finish Editing Zone.West . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.West . indicating that it’s the active view. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You activated zone visibility in the views. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.TIP After you finish editing the zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 11 Close the System Browser. 5 Click in the Level 1 . click Training Files. In this exercise. click Reference. 9 In the System Browser. under Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. enter 2 .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.Area B. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. under Identity Data.

and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 In the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 15 Press Esc. Select Attached End. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view. click in the Level 2 .Zoning floor plan. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. zoom out.

4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. In this exercise. and select 109 Lounge.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Front. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. click Training Files. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and click OK. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. click the corner where the Top. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. on the ViewCube.East. double-click the zone tag. and zone information. verify that Wireframe is selected. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Lounge . 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.rvt. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . for Name Value. space.Zoning to make it the active view.Zoning view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you verify the building.

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you isolate the space. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ On the Details tab. Next. click (Isolate). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. With 109 Lounge selected. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Using the Highlight tool. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. ■ Click (Highlight). All spaces in the zone display in isolation.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. select 1_South_Area C. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.

View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and air changes per hour. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and then click OK. select 109 Lounge. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. This indicates the cooling set point. click . For Construction Type. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. Below the list of spaces and zones. and humidification set point. outdoor air per area. For Cooling Information. the space information displays for the selected space. This indicates the outdoor air per person. click . click (Shading). heating air temperature. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. click . verify that 23. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and in the People dialog. For Electrical Loads. Below the list of spaces and zones. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. scroll down in the left pane. verify that 21. and dehumidification set point. Next. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and then click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.22 °C : N/A is specified. the zone information displays for the selected zone. cooling air temperature.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Next. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C.22 °C : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. select Lounge/Recreation. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab.11 °C : 32. verify that <Building> is selected. For Heating Information. verify that <Building> is selected. For People.33 °C : 12. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ Next. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). This indicates the heating set point. and click OK.

and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 15 In the Project Browser. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. open MEP . 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. roofs. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. floors. 12 Using the methods learned previously. enter 0. click Cancel. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and other room-bounding components. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. For Offset.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and zone information. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Plenum. select Plenum. Click OK. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and select space Plenum 212P. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. for Number. you verified building. Under Energy Analysis. enter 212P. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. In this exercise. For Name. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.

On the Weather tab. For Ground Plane. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. click Training Files. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. and click OK. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. select School or University. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). 8 In the drawing area. For Location. NH.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. In order to select a space. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Click OK twice. verify that 300 is specified. For Project Phase. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Energy Data. click in the Value field. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. select space Library 219. double-click Level 2 . 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that New Construction is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. and click OK. under Energy Analysis. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . for City. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Edit. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. enter 03101. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that <Building> is specified. is selected. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Postal Code. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Export Complexity.rvt. If. On the Place tab. For Building Construction. under Volume Computations. verify that Level 1 is selected. you need to select this option. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m.Space Plan. verify that Manchester. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. right-click. for Building Service.

In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. click Edit. For Building Construction. Under Power. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. is specified. or neither. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Select the space associated with the warning. verify that Occupiable is selected. verify that <Building> is specified. For Building Service. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. for Values. select Actual. For Condition Type. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . and click OK. enter 45 W. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. For Sensible. select Actual. Click OK. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Library . and then click . Select Area per person. both. m. click in the Value column. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. for Values. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click Edit. enter 60 W. For Latent. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. and enter 15 sq. Next. Click OK twice. for Values. NH. You have verified the building information. and click to learn the cause for the warning. 12 Click the Details tab. For Space Type. a cooling load. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select Specified. select Heated and cooled. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog).Audio Visual. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Location. verify that School or University is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). for Values. For People. verify that Manchester. select Specified.

under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. or zone information. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. and click OK. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and a loads report displays. and zone information for the building model. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. click Calculate. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and under Heating Information. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 16 After you review the loads report. and can be modified here. There should be no warnings displayed. 15 Review the loads report for project. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. weather. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 21 Click OK. select 219 Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. or make any changes to the model. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. space.11°C. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. You should correct the space error in the building model. click Information). 17 In the loads report. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. under Energy Analysis. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties.Space Plan. select 219 Library. space.

indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . For Color Scheme.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Zoom in to the legend. in relatively small increments. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the drawing area. Click OK. select HVAC Zones. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.rvt.

Expanded Ranges. The new scheme displays in the view. select the color scheme legend. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. and click OK.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select Cooling Load . under Schemes. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

click Training Files. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 11 Using the method learned previously. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. In the next exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m.

enter Space Airflow Schedule. select Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Air Flow. ■ Click Calculated Value. Select Schedule building components. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select New Construction. Select Formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. for Select available fields from. click (Browse). enter . enter Airflow Delta.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. more category options are available. In the Calculated Value dialog. Click OK. For Formula. Click OK. For Phase. For Name.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. and then click . select Calculated Supply Airflow. for Formula. select HVAC. Under Available fields. For Discipline. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Type. and click OK. In the Fields dialog.Space Fill is the active view.

or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Click OK twice. and Blank line. select red. For Fields. a view opens that contains the selected space. select Not Between. select Airflow Delta. For Then by. and then click Conditional Format. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and then select Hidden field. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. click the color swatch. select Number. right-click to access schedule properties. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. select Level. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In the Color dialog. For Value. For Background Color. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . verify that Show is highlighted. Under Conditions to Use. Select Ascending. Header. and click OK. ■ The schedule displays.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s.

the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In this exercise. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In the next lesson. In later exercises. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.

After completing the air systems lesson. In this lesson. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you modify air terminal parameters. Then.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. As you place the air terminals. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After system creation. 79 . you will create supply air systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you size ductwork and validate your air system design.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 3 In the ceiling view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. and scroll to space 223. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display.

13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared. Also. for Flow. and press Enter. and select M_Supply Diffuser . and press Enter. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. select the diffuser. If the host element is modified or moved. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. the hosted elements are updated as well. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. which in this case is the ceiling grid.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. type 3600. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. as shown. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. enter 215 L/s. click Place on Face. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 9 On the Placement panel. 17 Move the cursor down. and then select both Copy and Multiple. and then press Esc to end the command. The schedule updates with the new flow data.

Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 In the Open dialog. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. 29 Place 2 diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. click Yes. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 28 On the Placement tab. clear Leader. click Place on Face. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 25 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 22 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select one of the diffusers. Next. As you place the return diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and click Open.rfa. as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.

under Other. 32 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . as shown. and click OK. click Yes. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. for Reference. select one of the return diffusers. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Level. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 31 In the alert dialog. and click to select the lines. select Strong Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.

as shown. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 40 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. align the other return diffuser. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 43 Using the same method. select the vertical grid line as shown. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown.

As you place the air terminals. select both return diffusers. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. enter 310 L/s.44 While pressing Ctrl. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and press Enter. and click OK. clear LeftArrow. right-click. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. under Mechanical. for Flow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 47 Using the same method. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling.

select M_Supply Diffuser . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. at the lower left corner of the building. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.200 Neck. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 8 In the Type Selector. click 1 : 100.rvt.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. for Scale. the space crossing lines display. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. expand HVAC . 10 In the drawing area. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 9 On the Options Bar. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and double-click Level 1 . 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.Design to make it the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor.

click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 15 Press Esc. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. Under Mechanical . Click OK. type 6000. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. for Flow. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. Also.Airflow. enter 2400. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. move the cursor down. By copying the diffuser. As a result. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Offset. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. and then press Enter. 11 Select the diffuser. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. under Constraints. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. enter 170 L/s.

16 Using the same method. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. clear Leader.

For Category. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Sort by. type. and click View Properties. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. Type. for Embedded Schedule. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. under Available Fields. select 21. it is a negative value.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. click Edit. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. and then right-click in the schedule. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Air Terminals. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. double-click System Type. 29 Using the same method. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 210 L/s. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. for Flow. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. under space 115. 27 In the schedule. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and Flow. under Other. 26 Using the method learned previously. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. and press Enter. Next. Mark. tile the windows. 25 Click OK 3 times. mark. select Mark.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Plan . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.Design. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. as shown. As you highlight the zone. and maximize Level 1 .The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. 31 In the drawing area.

35 In the Type Selector. select M_WSHP . 36 In the drawing area. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.High Efficiency . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Click OK. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.3 times the heating load).Horizontal .43 W (approximately 1. and under Energy Analysis.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.7-18 kW . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.

you also use the System Browser to validate systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. When you highlight a space. 44 Zoom in to space 115. enter . 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. indicating that it’s the active view. right-click the title. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. After creating the logical connection. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. You then create the logical connection between the system components. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Keep the System Browser open. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. As you add diffusers to systems. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. including energy analysis. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. However. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. In this exercise.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. and click View ➤ Systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. the space crossing lines display. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.Design is highlighted. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and click OK. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.

and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 18 Click OK. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. review the Number of Elements. 11 In the drawing area. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Connect Into. the air terminals are the children. 17 Using the method learned previously. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. System Name. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. and the system connects them. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 15 Click Cancel. the number of elements is updated. On the Options Bar. and Flow value.

which updates the name in the System Browser. click Training Files. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 22 Click OK. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. for Mark. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Identity Data. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.Rename the system Next. 25 Click OK. for System Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. under Mechanical. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.

Select Branch. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter 3000. click Settings. for Solution Type.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.Round. For Flex Duct Type. indicating that it’s the active view. select the upper left diffuser. For Duct Type. select Flex Duct Round : Flex .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.HVAC Plan. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 7 On the Options Bar. the Network type provides several solutions. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. the space crossing lines display. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. For Offset. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. When you highlight a space using the cursor. In this case. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the drawing area. select Network. For Duct Type. enter 3000. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and display solution 1. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. A Generate Layout tab displays.Design is highlighted. which provides various layout tools. Also. For Offset.

The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. enter 900. click Modify. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For example. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. as shown. or offset elevations are incorrect. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Either relocate the system components. Click OK. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. 11 Click Finish Layout. as is the elbow itself. 9 On the Generate Layout panel.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you’ll get an error in a later step. or manually modify the duct.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. for Color Scheme. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. and click to select it. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. fittings. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.Flow. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. a disconnection exists. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. The first time you press Tab. If the entire network does not highlight. thus it is not part of the system. Using a flow-based color scheme. and equipment. highlight a segment of the main duct. select Duct Color Fill . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Usually. and click OK.

Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). under Graphics. select one of the diffusers in the system. 20 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.Airflow. but not all values are used in this view. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select By View. for Values Displayed. and press Enter. and then click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. for Flow. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. under Mechanical . decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. and click OK.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Select the upper segment of main duct. for Schemes. and drag it to the right. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 26 Click OK. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.Velocity. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select the color scheme legend. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. click Cancel. and select 400. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Click OK. Select Only. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. highlight a segment of the duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . select Duct Color Fill . for Branch Sizing. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. select Friction.65 Pa/m. Under Constraints. Select Restrict Height. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select Calculated Size Only. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and then click to select it. and enter .21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.

pressure. and pressure loss. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Use the information that displays (flow. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system.The ductwork and fittings are updated. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. static pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Using this tool. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 .NOTE As you inspect a system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. also known as the critical path. click Training Files. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m.rvt. 35 Click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.

Design is highlighted. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click Draw Duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. and select the WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .HVAC Plan .

8 Press Esc twice to end the command. right-click the connector grip. and click Draw Duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. double-click MEP . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. enter 3000. Front. 15 On the ViewCube. 14 In the Project Browser. for Offset. click the corner where the Top. select the top right diffuser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 11 On the Options Bar.3D MEP. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . NOTE When drawing duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is automatically created. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 19 In the drawing area. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. it is considered a closed loop. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. in space 115.

25 Press Esc. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.22 Using the same method.

30 Press Esc twice. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and then click Modify. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.

and click OK. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then click OK. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 40 Using the same method. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select a segment of the main duct. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). such as a plenum. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and click to select it. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . under Constraints. clear Restrict Height. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. under Mechanical . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.Airflow.

108 .

you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. including 2 base mounted pumps. Then. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Create return and supply piping systems. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. and a cooling tower located on the roof. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. In this lesson. 109 . Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. on level 3 of the building model.

in corridor 328. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. as shown. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Left Return . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Horizontal High Efficiency . click Training Files.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .7-18kW .Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and select M_WSHP . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. click the top edge of the WSHP. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 7 On the Options Bar. as shown. and enter 600. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the dimension. 8 Click the corridor wall face. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 10 Select the WSHP. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. verify that Wall faces is selected. and click to place the dimension.

verify that the WSHP is still selected.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. select the 2 WSHPs. and in the Type Selector.) 14 Click Modify. as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

for Offset. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and click to place it in the mechanical room. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 21 Click Modify. as shown. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. enter 2750.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Water Flow. enter 0. Under Mechanical.75 L/s.

including flow and pressure. Unlike logical connections (systems).22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create the logical connection between the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. analyses cannot be performed. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. but without a corresponding system. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. You can create pipes to connect system components.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. As you assign equipment to systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. In the System Browser. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. while pressing Ctrl. 5 In the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.HVAC Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. right-click the Systems column heading. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. where it is easier to review the information. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Assigning a system component to an existing system.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and click View ➤ Piping. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This display indicates that the system is selected. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Therefore. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.Mech 330). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select the 2 WSHPs. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. click Training Files. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.

17 On the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the Edit System tool is not active. Notice that on the Options Bar. for System Name. for System Name. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 10 On the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the boiler. You have created the hydronic return system. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

under Design ➤ HVAC . In heating mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.Design.HVAC Plan . and bypasses the cooling tower. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Piping System | 117 . the boiler supplies heated water to the system. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the cooling tower. In cooling mode. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 26 Click Finish Editing System. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Close the roof plan view. and click OK. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 25 Select the boiler. double-click Roof .

You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. you can view several parameters. for Water Flow. 32 In the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and click Properties. including the flow rate and size of the component. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. The hydronic supply system highlights in red.8. indicating the logical connection. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click OK. and click Expand All. expand Piping. 29 Right-click CHWS. and click Select. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click OK. and click Column Settings. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. enter 0.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. In the System Browser. under Mechanical. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required.

The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).HVAC plan view range are highlighted. click Training Files. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. click Check None. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 5 In the Filter dialog. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . the boiler. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Mech 330). 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. A system preview displays in red. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and click to select it.HVAC Plan . You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Mechanical Equipment. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. you can place the cursor over a system component. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Notice that all components within the Level 3 . then the Select a System dialog displays. press Tab to highlight the system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .rvt. When you draw a box to select components. and click OK.

12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. 13 Click Cancel. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. enter 450. select Perimeter. duct. 11 On the Options Bar. or architectural components. structural beams. click Settings. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. It does not reference the architecture. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .9 In the Select a System dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that Solutions is selected. 10 Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. select CHWR.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.75 L/s. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. With each Tab. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 17 Optionally. the flow for each WSHP is 0. and press Tab 3 times. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. to display the path with thinner lines. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 18 Place the cursor over the piping. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 19 In the drawing area.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog.75 L/s). and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Select the boiler.50 L/s. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. 24 Press Esc. verify that the value for Flow is 1.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. 23 Under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and access its instance properties.50 L/s. under Mechanical. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click Edit System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 27 On the System Tools panel. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . the Number of Elements is now 8. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. double-click Level 1 . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).Design ➤ Floor Plans. 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Logically.HVAC Plan . On the Options Bar. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 32 Click Finish Editing System.Design.

and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. under Mechanical. so the total flow of 6. you physically close the CHWR loop. access its instance properties. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. which propagates flow throughout the system. 38 Using the same method. as shown. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.50 L/s.44 L/s.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.94 L/s. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.94 L/s. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Next. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 35 Using the drag control. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. and click Cancel. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. note that the value for Flow is 4.

41 Click OK.00%. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select a WSHP. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select CHWS. For Slope. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and then click OK. enter 0. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. enter 450. 40 In the Select a System dialog. For Inset. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. Click Settings.

47 In the drawing area. (Both sections are at the same elevation. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 46 Click Modify. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. In a later exercise. as shown.

49 Select the 4-way arrow control. To create the piping system. 51 Click Finish Layout. as shown. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. or offset elevations are incorrect. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 50 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. or manually modify the pipe.

and the return pipes are magenta. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Design is highlighted. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. click Training Files. as shown. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . double-click 3D Building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. As you work in the training file.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. as shown. 7 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 6 Press Delete.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 12 In the 3D view. and click OK. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary.11 In the Select Connector dialog. 13 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. The connections are automatically created. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the boiler. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and the lower one is secondary. select the return pipe riser. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system.

Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 381. ■ Move the cursor down.In a plan view. enter 600. and you select 1 connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. for Offset. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.

18 Press Esc twice.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 21 In the Select Connector dialog. As you place piping runs that are close together. and click OK. select the primary base mounted pump. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 19 In the plan view. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click the minus symbol. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select it. as shown. right-click the bottom connector. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. you select the tee fitting. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. and click to draw the pipe.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump. and when the connector point displays.27 Move the cursor to the right.

for Offset. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. enter 1200. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 If necessary. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe.28 Press Esc.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

as shown. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. type 300.■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click to create the pipe. for Offset. and press Enter. enter 2850. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.

140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you validate the flow through the system. Next. You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify.

under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. and click Element Properties. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. notice that Flow is 6.50 or 50% of the Flow.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. right-click. When you create the pumps in parallel. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. view the properties for the secondary pump. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 40 Click Cancel. notice that under Mechanical. and click OK. In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. select the cooling tower. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 46 Press Esc. the value is 0 L/s.44 L/s. 42 Click OK. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Press Esc. for Cooling Water Flow. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. which is rounded up to 3. 48 In the plan view. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 44 In the 3D view.44 L/s). Connect the cooling tower Next. as shown. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. select the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc. 50 In the 3D View.44 L/s. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and close the dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. the water bypasses the cooling tower.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.HVAC Plan . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. When the valve is open. as shown. and is heated by the boiler. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .52 Close the file with or without saving it. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Valves In this exercise.

7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.4 On the Options Bar. and select M_Ball Valve . verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. The bypass valve is closed by default. Adding Valves | 145 . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 8 Press Esc twice. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

place another M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc.

and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. verify that Flow is 0 L/s.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 6. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. 19 Using the same method. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. and click OK.44 L/s. Adding Valves | 147 . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. right-click.

■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). click Training Files. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select M_Ball Valve . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and select M_Ball Valve . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 22 Using the method you just learned. 20 Select the bypass valve. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. Initially. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.44 L/s. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. In heating mode. validate that the Flow is 6.44 L/s.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.

Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.HVAC Plan . as shown. select Pipe Color Fill . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Flow. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Size. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. for Schemes. and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. click Pipe Color Fill .

The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. enter 1. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Click OK. and click to select the branch. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Either relocate the system components. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . or offset elevations are incorrect. and enter 220 Pa/m. and for Velocity. 13 Press Esc. or manually modify the pipe. Select And.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. for Branch Sizing.5 m/s. Under Constraints. select Friction. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .14 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. pressure. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.rvt. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using the System Inspector.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and double-click 3D Building. Inspecting the System | 151 . Inspecting the System In this exercise. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. This information helps you modify the system design. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. as required. and pressure information including pressure loss. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. flow. as shown.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping.

In this exercise.Design. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125.4 Pa. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.0 L/s. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and to size pipe. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. for Fluid Temperature. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. inspect Section 6 again. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. the Static Pressure is 41916. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select 32° C. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. 10 Click Finish. Warnings display. 9 Using the same method. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .rvt. you need to validate them. targeting those systems that need attention.HVAC Plan .7. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. and double-click Level 3 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.1 Pa.Note that the Flow is 1. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.

right-click Hydronic Return. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). click Close. 4 In the System Browser. thus assigning the components to a system. double-click Level 1 . but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and click View. 7 In the System Browser. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. In the System Browser. TIP If you have multiple views open. After you assign components to a system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. right-click the Systems titlebar. As you learned when placing components. and for pipe sizing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.HVAC Plan . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. For example. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS.Design floor plan. 12 In the System Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan .NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. and confirm unassigned system components. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. otherwise. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. After you have assigned all components to systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. expand the Unassigned folder. 10 Using the same methods. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 6 In the Project Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and select Level 3 . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. the pipe is associated with that system. and click Expand All. and click Show to view all of the system components. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 155 .13 Right-click CHWR.

156 .

157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

click Training Files. In this exercise you review electrical settings. For Factor. select 90. enter 70. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. ■ ■ For Material. distribution systems. wiring. Select Correction Factor. enter 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Copper. For Temperature. As you place components and create circuits. select Copper. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. You also add a wiring type. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.04. select Wiring Types. For Material. ■ Click New Correction Factor. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. speeding up the design phase. Click OK. enter THHN. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.Wire Sizes. and demand factors that are applied in the design. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. expand Wiring . click (Open).rvt.

select Demand Factors. enter 1. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select THHN. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Insulation. enter 240. For L-G Voltage. Click Split. select Power. enter 50. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Voltage Definitions. enter 220. Under More Than.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For L-L Voltage.0. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. select Steel. enter 250. For Phase. For Wires. For Max Size. select 240. enter 240. By specifying a range. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Value. select Hot Conductor Size. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. select 10000 VA. For Neutral Size. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. select 120. For Maximum. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. enter 2000. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Single. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. enter 120/240. select 3. For Conduit Type. Select Neutral Required. select 75. select Distribution Systems. For Neutral Multiplier. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. Click OK. For Minimum.

For Type of Parameter. such as offices. select Electrical . Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2 . Under Categories. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lighting Plan. Click OK twice. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Add. click Training Files. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. select Electrical. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. and conference rooms. under the Electrical . select Illuminance.rvt. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Spaces. restrooms. For Group Parameter Under. In this case the key style is the type of space and. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. enter Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial.Lighting. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. 5 In the drawing area. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. click (Open). For Discipline. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Lighting group in the space element properties. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Verify that Instance is selected.

14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. under Available Fields. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . enter Open Office. For Name. Select Schedule Keys. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. note the Required Lighting Level parameter.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. and for Key Name. enter 485. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click Required Lighting Level. enter Lighting Levels. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. select Spaces. under Electrical . and click OK. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Click OK. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Click OK.Lighting. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings.

select Required Lighting Level. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . change the sort order back to the default setting.Lighting Plan. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. for Sorting/Grouping. Notice that as you enter the data. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. 22 Using the same method. 21 Click OK twice. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . Select Blank Line. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. click Edit. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . which is mapped to project units. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. 27 Click OK. click (Open). the value input applies only to the selected space. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. for Lighting Levels. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Identity Data. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Later in this exercise. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. select Instruction-Standard. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. In this exercise. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . that Required Lighting Level is blank.

and press ENTER. click (Duplicate). Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes.00 lx. click (Add Value) again.00. for Category. enter 900.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. select Required Lighting Level. then the new value will be 400 lx. select Spaces. for Title. click Training Files. For Color. For example. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. and press ENTER. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. and click (Add Value) five times. Under Schemes. Select the scheme for 450. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.00 lx. Select the scheme for 500 lx. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add.00. Select the scheme for At Least 20. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. enter Required Lighting Levels. verify the By Range is selected. for Name. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. 00 lx still selected. enter 800. enter Required Lighting and click OK. ■ Click OK.00 lx. and in the At Least column. and press Enter.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. enter 200. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. and click (Add Value). 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes.

select Illuminance. select Spaces. enter Lighting Delta. For Name. double-click Number. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. Click OK. select Spaces. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 13 Click Calculated Value. and double-click Level 2 . 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 .Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. and Required Lighting Level.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical. 8 In the drawing area. For Type. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Name. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. for Available Fields. For Discipline. For Color Scheme. select Required Lighting. Average Estimated Illumination. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. Level.Lighting CF.

Click OK three times. select Red. for Sort by. Click OK. for Formula. Click OK twice. for Fields. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Lighting Delta. Select Blank Line. select Average Estimated Illumination. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Conditional Format. Select Header. under Condition. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Level. press the spacebar. Click Background Color. select Not Between. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. type a hyphen. for Custom Colors. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. For Value. select Required Lighting Level. click Browse. and click Browse. enter -55 lx and 55 lx.■ For Formula. for Test. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. First. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. as you place lighting fixtures. Use the System Browser to check your design. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. power circuits. Then. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create a panel schedule. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create power loads. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 171 . you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . select Average Estimated Illumination. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. for Basic Colors. Under Scheme Definition. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. By using orange as the color for this range. select the color legend. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. In the Color dialog. Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. click Training Files. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. for the Spaces Category. click (Open). 8 In the Project Browser. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. You can create additional color schemes.Lighting Ceiling plan. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. select Orange.Lighting CF view is open.

with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 13 Click the Level 2 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. zoom to space Library 219. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.

however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Click to place the fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.the +/. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . the fixtures will move accordingly. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) .277V. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.5 fc range. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.5 fc range is satisfied. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. scroll to view space space Library 219. In the Name dialog. enter 162. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. for Apparent Load. for Name enter and click OK.00 VA. ■ Under Electrical Loads. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

■ Click Apply. and click OK. click Training Files. Placing Switches. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.rvt. for Type Mark. select Xenon and click OK. enter . zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click (Open). click the value for Initial Intensity. and Receptacles | 183 . click the value for Initial Color. Junction Boxes. 9 In space Library 219. select Luminous Flux. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. In the Select File dialog. Placing Switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. enter . Under Electrical. for Color Preset. Click OK. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. select the top center fixture. Junction Boxes. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. click the value for Light Loss Factor. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.85. 2 In the drawing area. you add switches. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. for Lamp. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. specify 15000. In the next exercise.93. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. for Ballast Loss Factor. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m.ies and click Open. and receptacles to your design. Under Photometrics. ■ Click OK twice. select 463T5_S. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.00 lm. Under Photometrics. junction boxes. enter F15. select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics. ■ Under Photometrics.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 7 Click to place the switch.277V.

8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Select M_Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 . The element type M_Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector.rfa and click Open. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog.

enter 2750. for Mark. Under Electrical. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. enter JB-1NL. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. 21 In the drawing area. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Click OK twice.Offset. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. zoom to space Library 219.14 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Level 2 . Click Edit Type. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 Select the junction box. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note the Number of Poles is 1. In the Type Properties dialog.

Space Number. and Number of Elements. and Voltage. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. Space Name. NOTE If necessary. 24 For any column. Expand Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 26 In the System Browser. Expand General. right-click and click Column Settings. Junction Boxes. Click OK. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Receptacles | 187 .22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. 23 In the System Browser. Select Load. Distribution System. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Size.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Switches. move the cursor along the wall. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 38 Select the receptacle.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down.

Placing Switches.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. and Receptacles | 191 . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Junction Boxes.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

click Training Files. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Adding wiring to a project is optional. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).208V MCB . 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.rvt. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area.equipment. and work toward the higher voltage.Surface: 100A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

enter 20. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. for Max. #1 Pole Breakers. 8 Select the panelboard. select 120/208 Wye. for Max. For Panel Name. enter PP-2B. Click OK. 7 Press ESC to end the command.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Loads. select 480/277 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 9 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Distribution System. enter 20.Loads. 15 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .480V MCB . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter LP-2B. Click OK. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 14 Select the panelboard.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and for Category. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221. 23 In the Filter dialog.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. which is the logical connection between the elements. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 20 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 28 Press ESC to end the command.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command.35 Select the left three-way switch.

Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 42 In the Filter dialog.Loads. for Hot Conductors. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Check None. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.39 Using the same method. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. except without wire. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. select Wires. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. Click OK. and create permanent wiring. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open).rvt. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter 2. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. and for Category. Click OK. Next you create circuits without showing wire.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Power. Click OK. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and verify that Load. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 13 In the System Browser.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Rating. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Voltage. Distribution System. right-click on the Systems heading. Expand Electrical. and then expand circuit 1. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221.

Click OK. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 30 Close the System Browser. 22 With the junction box still selected. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. change the Voltage to 277V. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click Tags. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. under Electrical. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . for Type Mark. 47 In the drawing area. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. For Circuit Number. 35 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Break. Click OK. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Yes. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. click Edit Type. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. enter FR4. click below the first one to place it. 40 Click OK twice. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. under Identity Data. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top.

50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left.rvt. click (Open). 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 54 Select all of the tags. click Check None. 52 In the Save As dialog. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixture Tags. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Category. Next you create a switch system. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Click Save.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. for File Name. Click OK. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. and click Apply. click Training Files. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. 57 In the Filter dialog. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. enter a comma.rfa. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

Creating a Switch System | 205 . 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. under Electrical Lighting. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 2 In the drawing area. for Switch ID. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter a. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.

206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Click OK. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter b. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.Lighting. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

under Electrical . select the PP-2B panel. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. Click OK. for Hot Conductors. and for Category.Loads. and click Element Properties. enter 2. 4 In the Filter dialog.rvt. Click OK. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Circuits are used for power. lighting. In the left pane of the Open dialog.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 7 In space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. select Electrical Fixtures. and data systems. click Training Files. click Check None. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.

select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and click Open. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. select Wiring.13 Select the wire again. and in the drawing area. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 In the Load Family dialog. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.rfa. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and in the right pane. and click to select the circuit. 19 Click OK.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. select the PP-2B panel. as shown. in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 26 Press Delete. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click the connector of the first receptacle. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.

210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. Next you balance the loads for your design. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Under Electrical-Loads.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Click OK. Finally. for Rating. select panel LP-2B. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. click Training Files. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.rvt. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. zoom to space Electrical 220. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 1-#10. 3 In the Electrical space. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 2 In the drawing area. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Had there been a greater imbalance. Scroll down. After re-balancing loads. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. enter 30A. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. click Open. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#10. 6 Click OK. 1-#12. click Rebalance Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. the distribution is shifted.

and click OK. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog. enter 25A. 24 Click Select Panel. under Electrical . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. for Rating. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 Select panel PP-2B. enter 40A. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.Loads. and click OK. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select the transformer TP-2B.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.Loads. and click Finish Editing Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. for Rating. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.

rvt. for Font. select Bold and Italic. enter 5 mm. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 6 In the Project Browser. click (Open). NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Under Body Text. click Edit. enter 4 mm. Under Header Text. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet.Panel Schedules. 4 Close the report. select Berlin Sans FB. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click Training Files. for Font Size. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. and open E601 . expand Sheets (all). under Other. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Appearance. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The Panel Schedule Report displays. Click OK. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click OK twice. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. Under Header Text.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. for Font Size. Select PP-2B.

Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. each with a load of 180VA. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. click Training Files.rvt. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Expand Unassigned.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. click (Open). Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. select space Lounge 212. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.

17 In the drawing area. 18 Select panel LP-2C. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. for Panel. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Checking Your Design | 215 . In the System Browser. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Warnings. 15 In the dialog.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. select MDP-1. zoom to space Electrical 214. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. you create a PVC pipe type. In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 4 In the Name dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. in addition to loading existing families. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. click Training Files.Plumbing Plan . and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and click OK. Adding a pipe size. 219 . and click Properties. right-click PVC .Vent. type PVC . and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. planning is critical to a successful design.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Sanitary.

Sch 40 . Tee.000 mm. enter 54. enter -1250. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click Main. PVC . select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . and open Metric\M_Trap P . 13 In the right panel. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.PVC . select None. enter 46. for Material.DWV: Standard. select Plastic. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 In the right pane. Cross. under Mechanical. 24 For Inside Diameter. click Pipe Settings. select Branch. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 6 Click OK. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 27 For the new pipe size. For Offset.PVC .5 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 45. and click OK. Tap.DWV. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for Nominal. 22 Click New Size. select Sanitary. 15 For System Type. In the Project Browser. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. under Pipe Types. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.293 mm.Vent is listed. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.Sch 40 . select Tee. select M_Tee Sanitary .DWV: Standard. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Sch 40 . refer to Revit MEP Online Help. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 10 On the Selection panel. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 26 Click OK.PVC . 18 For System Type. select Sanitary.006 mm.rfa. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. enter 10°. click Modify. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. click Training Files. 25 For Outside. 17 In the left pane. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.

you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. 221 . and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. add a hot water heater. and hot and cold water piping. sanitary piping. Create the sanitary plumbing system. including plumbing fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. Create the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

at the midpoint of the detail lines. as shown. select Sanitary 107. a toilet. for example. select one of the components in the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. The base is placed. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view.

The default settings are automatically modified. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 21 On Options Bar. enter -350 mm. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Branch. 25 In the left pane. 30 Click Modify. and for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .19 On the Options Bar. You accept this suggested solution. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. click Solutions. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 24 For Offset.Sanitary. 29 On the Options Bar. select Intersections. enter 1. select Main. for Diameter. enter -350 mm. for Slope. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system.Sanitary. 28 On the Options Bar. enter -1225. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Solution Type. 26 For Pipe Type. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. select PVC . You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. and click OK. select PVC .05%. 23 For Pipe Type. select 100 mm. 27 For Offset. and click Settings. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments.

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.33 In the 3D view. as shown. as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 34 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed.Overall. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Public. 5 On the Placement panel. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). select 560 mmx560 mm .Design is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown.rvt. in the Type Selector.Rectangular. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. under M_Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . 4 On the Element panel.

On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 711. select Multiple. 8 Select the sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify.2.

14 On the Edit Piping System panel. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Press Esc. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 In the System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 In the drawing area. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. enter 711. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. click Add To System. 15 Click the 3 sinks.2.

16 On the Edit System panel.Overall. as shown. 19 In the 3D view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . click Finish Editing System. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Select the fitting. double-click 3D Plumbing . use the ViewCube to orient the view. In the System Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 21 Select the tee.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. with the tee fitting selected. and click to draw the pipe. enter 1. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). When you press the Spacebar. press Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 760 mm.05%. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. for Slope.22 In the plan view. and click Apply. 27 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 24 On the Options Bar.

move the cursor over the stub pipe. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting. 31 Click Modify. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .Sch 40 . 30 In the 3D view.PVC .DWV. 29 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 32 Select the double wye fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. select Standard.

39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 36 In the section view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the right connector. for Offset. enter 150 mm. In the next steps. 37 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. on the Options Bar. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 34 Press Esc. you add pipe segments to the double wye. zoom in to the double wye fitting. enter 305 mm. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. double-click the section head to open the section view. and press Enter.

43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 42 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).

draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Esc. 48 Click Modify. enter 150 mm. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. press Spacebar. 46 In the section view.

select Standard. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 54 Click Modify.PVC .DWV. under M_Trap P . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 53 Using the same method. 52 In the plan view. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 56 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 51 In the Type Selector. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select the P-Trap on the left. 55 In the 3D view.

Click Modify. In the plan view. and press Enter. Select the double wye pipe on the left. enter 150 mm.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the right sink to the double wye. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. and click Draw Pipe. 58 Using the same method. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click in the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap.. select the left P-Trap. Move the cursor to the left.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . click Finish to select the recommended solution. under Pipe Types. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.■ In the 3D view. select PVC Sanitary. as shown. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select a proposed solution. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. while pressing Ctrl.

click Finish. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.05% is selected. adjusting the sanitary stack. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. and verify the slope.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 62 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that 1. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.

6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Overall. 5 Select the tee.Design. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click Draw Pipe.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and click to draw the pipe. select the vertical stack. 10 In the 3D view.Design.Sch 40 . select the elbow fitting on the right.Floor level line. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .DWV. click Modify. select Standard.PVC . 9 In the Type Selector. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 7 On the Selection panel. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 In the Section view. as shown. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Plumbing Plan . right-click the top connector. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

43 In the 3D view. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. You create a new pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click Standard. 267 . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. If the tutorial training files are not present. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you can choose to save your work. and click Duplicate. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk.rvt. However. In this tutorial.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. In this lesson. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.

You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. for Material. under Mechanical. For System Type. click Rename. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 6 In the Project Browser. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and click Properties. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you create project parameters and work with schedules. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For Pipe Type. In this exercise. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. duct. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. verify that 2800 is specified. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that 2800 is selected. In the left pane. or architectural components.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). structural beams. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. and enter Fire Protection Wet. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Carbon Steel. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Main. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For Offset. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. For Offset. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 9 Click OK. For Pipe Type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. However. In the next exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Next.

3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 6 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Fire Protection. Under Categories. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. enter Zone 1.Design is highlighted. select space Instruction 221 as shown. and click Element Properties. for Name. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Using a crossing window. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Add. For Group parameter under. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. and then click OK. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. select the upper half of the building.Fire Protection Piping Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Fire Protection. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Click OK twice. right-click. select Spaces. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Sprinkler Zone. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .

16 Close the file with or without saving it. under Fire Protection. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 10 In the Filter dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. you create schedules for sprinkler design. enter Zone 2. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. 13 Using the same method. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. and then access instance properties. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. including a calculated value parameter. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. click Training Files. verify that only Spaces are selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click OK. to which you add various parameters. select Zone 1. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool.

7 Click OK. select mm. and on the ribbon. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Length. For Type of Parameter. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Unit symbol. 9 On the Formatting tab.Design is highlighted. 10 In the Format dialog. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. For Key name. For Group parameter under. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Click OK. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click on each column separator. For Name. The schedule displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Maximum Spacing. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Light. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. click the Formatting tab. select Maximum Spacing. select Spaces. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Obstructed-Combustible. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Units. Select Schedule keys. and click Field Format. 11 Click OK twice. select Millimeters. enter Protection Area Construction Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 14 Select the new header. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. select Fire Protection. click Add Parameter. for Name. Click OK. 6 Using the same method. select 0 decimal places. For Rounding. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.

enter 4575. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter Sprinkler Schedule.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Unobstructed Ordinary. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. and press Enter. enter 40. Unobstructed Extra. select Spaces. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

select Number. For Units. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Type. 22 Click OK twice. select Area. 19 Click the Formatting tab. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under Available fields. In the Fields dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select 0 decimal place. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Common. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Minimum Sprinklers. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Rounding. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. click . Click OK. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Discipline. select Fixed. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. and click Field Format. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list).

and select Totals only. select Number. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header and Blank line.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then click Field Format. For Then by (second instance). For Fields. select Hidden field. For Then by. for Sorting/Grouping. select Grand totals. select Level. click Edit. At the bottom of the dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Sprinkler Zone. and then select Hidden field. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. ■ In the Format dialog. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . verify that Use default settings is selected. for Sort by. and click View Properties. Select Header and Blank line. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Sprinkler Zone. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Level. under Other.

■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Embedded Schedule. 30 Click OK twice. double-click Type. under Other. for Filter. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. right-click the schedule. System Name. select Calculate totals. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Count. On the Formatting tab. for Available fields. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. and Count. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. delete the word Maximum. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. for Fields. and select Totals only. click Edit. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Grand totals. For Category. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and click View Properties.27 In the drawing area. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. for Filter by. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. select Level equals Level 2. select Sprinklers. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 48 In the floor plan. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select space 221 Instruction. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Ordinary. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. As a result. 43 Click Cancel. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and access the instance properties. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select space 221 Instruction. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 41 In the plan view. 46 With the space still selected. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. but their values are not determined. under Identity Data. and click OK. Unobstructed.Fire Protection Plan Design. Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. 44 In the schedule. for Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 52 Click OK. select Ordinary. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Light. double-click FP . This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. for Protection Area Construction Type. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of this tutorial. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. As you place the sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you create the system. go to http://www. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . By following the recommended workflow. you can choose to save your work. After finishing each exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. methodology. you will understand the process. and double-click Level 2 .Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.autodesk. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 279 . However. click Training Files.rvt. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.

When this happens. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 3 In the Project Browser. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. After placing the initial sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.

10 Press Esc twice. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 11 In the drawing area. select the sprinklers that you placed. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. 9 In space Instruction 202. and 207. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. verify that Constrain is cleared.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. as shown. 206. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Also. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.

specify a vertical offset. as shown. 17 In the Project Browser. and 200C).Fire Protection Piping Plan . open Design ➤ FP . Next. 200B. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then press Esc. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.Design. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 18 Type WT. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.

and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and press Enter. and click Element Properties.19 In the floor plan. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. This number is determined in the schedule. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Next. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. for Offset. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you adjust the offset. enter 2900 mm. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. After creating the logical connection. Notice that the schedule updates. 25 Click OK. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and with piping (physical connection). enter 4100. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.0. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 29 Press Esc. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. enter 11.FP_Ceiling view. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. move the cursor to the right. In this exercise. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. In the next exercise. For Number. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. under Constraints.

However. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. and select Piping. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 5 Right-click the header. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. click Training Files. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View ➤ Systems. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. as shown.Design is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.

and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. select an initial piping layout. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and select the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and click Select. press Tab.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. In the System Browser. 11 With the system still selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Creating a Piping System | 285 . click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . indicating the logical connection. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Next. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. within the Piping Systems folder. named Fire Protection Wet. place the cursor over a sprinkler.

select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. In the left pane. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 22 On the Options Bar. When the layout is finished. providing system editing tools. For Offset. For Pipe Type. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and number of elements in the system. for Diameter. 15 In the drawing area. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. click Place Base. 23 For Offset. verify that Main is selected. click Settings. system equipment. for System Name. and a piping layout preview displays. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 14 Click Finish Editing System. select Branch. 12 On the Options Bar.The Edit Piping System panel displays.Wet is selected. click Solutions. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 24 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that 2800. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. as shown. enter -3650. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 19 Click OK. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 13 In the System Browser. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm).0 is specified. and on the Options Bar. select 150 mm.

25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and select solution 4. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. verify that Network is selected. In general. click Modify. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and green represents branch lines). Creating a Piping System | 287 . On the Generate Layout panel. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. A (parallel movement control) displays.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. select a different layout solution. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 32 If necessary. Either relocate the system components. 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

33 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Next.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. 3 If necessary. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.Design is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and select the elbow fitting as shown. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. the Connect Into tool. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .Fire Protection Piping Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in. click Training Files.rvt.

click Finish Editing System.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 8 In the corridor. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. radiators. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . air terminals. or a system component to display system tools. 9 On the Edit System panel. you can select the pipe or duct. mechanical equipment. click Add To System. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and pipe or duct is created. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. and then tile the views. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and select solution 5. verify that Network is selected. for Solution Type.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 13 Click Finish Layout.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 14 Close the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. 23 View the result in the 3D view. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. verify that Solutions is selected.

and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .24 In the Piping Plan. 27 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 29 Using the same method. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 25 Select the sprinkler. and then press Esc. right-click.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 In the drawing area. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. select 2800. and click Draw Pipe.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.rvt. click Training Files. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 4 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. for Scale. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . select 1 : 50. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 31 In the plan view. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click on the section head to open the section view. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc.

Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 14 Select the tee fitting. select MEP Section. and click Draw Pipe. 19 Make Level 2 . for Sub-Discipline. 10 In the Project Browser. drag the top section boundary line up. Click OK. For Default View Template.Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 .9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then click Modify. and then right-click the top connector. select FP . 12 If necessary. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for View Name. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For View Classification. 17 Move the cursor up. enter 2135. 22 In the drawing area. and press Enter. select Design. enter FP Section_Stair.Fire Protection Plan . and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. Under Identity Data. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Select the elbow fitting. and click Apply Default View Template.Design.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. right-click Design ➤ FP .

28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps).Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Automatically Connect is active. select . and click Draw Pipe. for Diameter. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 24 Select the cabinet. and then click Modify. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 26 On the Options Bar.23 In the section view.

click Yes to load a family. and then click Modify. 32 In the Open dialog. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe.29 Close the section view.rfa. 33 In the Type Selector. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. verify that M_Gate Valve . Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . as shown. 31 In the alert dialog.50 mm is selected. and click Open.

Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. click Training Files. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.rvt.

starting at the lower left corner of the wing. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . select 25mm. 8 Click Modify. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. width. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. Changing the diameter. 4 In the floor plan view. and click OK. height. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. click Check None. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. or height. or width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. width. 6 In the Filter dialog. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). for Diameter. 7 On the Options Bar.

select the linked architectural file. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. NOTE Tags are view specific. and click Open. and after each segment highlights. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 18 In the 3D view. click to place the tag. . 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 17 On the View Control Bar. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.rfa. They display only in the view in which they were placed. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. By hiding the linked file. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. Press Esc. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 12 If necessary. Clear Leader.

press Tab. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. for Diameter. The main piping is selected and displays in red. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. select 100mm. and when the section highlights. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment.

for Diameter. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 26 Using the same method. as shown. 24 In the drawing area.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 25 On the Options Bar. select 40mm. and then tag the piping as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 23 Close the 3D view. The pipe diameter is modified. and maximize the floor plan.

allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this exercise. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You added tags to pipes. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you created a wet fire protection system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. In this tutorial.

304 .

create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. dependent views. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and view references. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. 2 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics.rvt. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and apply a view template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 307 . callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and click Properties. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. matchlines. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. right-click Copy of Level 1.

right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. more focused. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Apply Default View Template. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and then press Esc. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 Using the same method. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. as shown. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.rvt. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 2 Right-click the dependent view title.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 9 Click OK. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. views and put them on the sheet. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. create dependent views for areas B and C. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. 10 In the drawing area. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and click Rename. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 7 Close the file without saving. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.

In the Color dialog. For Line Weight. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select 11. For Line Pattern. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 19 In the drawing area. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. and click OK. select black.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. and then press Esc. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 13 Press Esc twice. select Double Dash . 14 Click Finish Matchline. click the current value.

on the Options Bar. for Target view. as shown. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.20 Select the upper view reference and. 25 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.

and click Properties. 2 Zoom in. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Plumbing Isometric . 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and zoom to each of the view references. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. for View Name. For Default View Template. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Using the same method. select Plumbing Isometric. 4 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.Domestic Water.rvt. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and select the section box. right-click 3D Plumbing. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. click Training Files. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.

9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. select Documentation. For Sub-Discipline. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. The section crop lines no longer display. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The selected piping displays as a dashed line. for View Classification. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Click Apply. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 10 Right-click. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Dash. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. and then click OK. Click OK. select 3.Domestic Water. select Plumbing.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click to select it. For Pattern.

13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. and click to select it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 15 Right-click.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it.

specify Plumbing . Click in the drawing area to start a text label.5mm Arial.16 Press Esc. For Slope. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . verify that Common is selected. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and for Default View Template. select 1. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 19 Using methods learned previously.Sanitary Waste. On the View Control Bar. and in the Type Selector. and in the view properties.Isometric. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. click on the Format value.

rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the Format dialog. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. and click to place the spot slope annotation. as shown. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. select To the nearest 10. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. indicating that it’s the active view. 22 Click OK twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. for Rounding. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Press Esc twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Creating Callout Views | 317 . 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. for Scale. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. select 1 : 50. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).

Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Expand the Callout Boundary category and.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click M601 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. drag it to the sheet. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. for Line Weight. 13 In the Project Browser. and select the viewport. under Sheets (all). 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. using the same method.

Creating Callout Views | 319 . For Title on Sheet. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and click Apply Default View Template. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Default View Template. for View Name. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 17 In the Project Browser. Click OK. right-click the callout view.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click Rename. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. under Names. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click Apply View Template. right-click the detail view. Creating Callout Views | 321 . and click OK. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 25 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

322 .

create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. work with model-based components.rvt. click Training Files. and annotation to create a legend. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. symbols. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. duct tags. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. Creating Annotations In this exercise. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 323 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. linetypes.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 8 With the text still selected. and select 1. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 9 Press Esc twice. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

verify that Leader is cleared. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Creating Annotations | 325 . a return diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. a segment of round duct. select a supply diffuser. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and then click Right Straight.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 15 On the Options Bar.

23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. click Load.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 20 In the Tags dialog. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. clear Leader.17 Click Modify. as shown. and click Open. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. under Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. and click OK. 25 In the drawing area. 24 On the Options Bar. If necessary. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Ducts. 21 In the Load Family dialog.rfa. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.

31 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and Attached End. select Horizontal. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Leader.26 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. Creating Annotations | 327 . 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and then press Esc. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

34 In the drawing area. select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . then click to the right to place the leader as shown. as shown. for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar. 36 Press Esc twice.

you use temporary dimensions to locate. Creating Dimensions | 329 . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well.rvt. not simply an instance property. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. and click OK. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and lock lighting fixtures. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and all elements of that type are affected. for Leader Arrowhead. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. select the last tag placed. 40 Using the method learned previously. 37 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. lay out. That’s because you changed a type property. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.

6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. select the dimension line. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 13 Press Esc. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 12 Click EQ. and then select the interior face of the wall. 14 Using the same method. On the Options Bar. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.

16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and press Enter. Creating a Legend In this exercise. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. linework. enter 2430. and offset them from the wall. annotation symbols. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. and notes. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. click Training Files. Creating a Legend | 331 . Because the dimensions are locked. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 17 Press Esc. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 20 Using the same methods. In the left pane of the Open dialog.9). 19 Select the dimension value (3376.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. click the 3 interior locks on the line.

Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . select Floor Plan.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. enter Diffuser Legend.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For View. For Scale. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select 1 : 50. 10 Using the same method. Click OK. click below the title to place the diffuser.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . and select 1. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.200 Neck. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

14 In the drawing area. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.11 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and select 1. Creating a Legend | 333 . click next to the top diffuser. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.

21 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. and then press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The selected detail lines are now thin. 26 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.DROP and its text note. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Select the component’s break line.

33 Click to the left of the left break line.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 34 Using the method learned previously. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. and then click Modify. and then click Modify. Creating a Legend | 335 . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. enter E.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Title w Line . 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. 337 .113 East elevation view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and text.Detailing 15 In this lesson. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. detail groups. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A drafting view using detail components. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A detail callout that references another view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 5 In the drawing area. place Power Riser . 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and click to place it.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. clear Leader. and then modify and align the views. 7 Drag the Power Riser . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 4 On the Options Bar. select each of the 2 panelboards. Next. 8 Using the same method. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 East on the sheet.

12 Select the Level 1 line. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Activate View. giving the appearance of a single view.9 Press Esc. 13 Right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click OK. right-click. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. under Identity Data. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Deactivate View. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 113 North view. for Title on Sheet. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.

Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. In the next exercise. 22 Press Esc. and select Title w Line . and click Activate View. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 21 Using the drag control. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. as shown. right-click. 19 Select the Level 1 line. you add wiring to the diagram.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. select the 113 East elevation view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

indicating that it’s the active view.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. As you draw. for Name. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. click Training Files. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Line Styles dialog. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. for Line Weight. click New. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Chain is selected.rvt. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. as shown. select 6.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.113 North view. and then click OK. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . In the New Subcategory dialog. notice that there are no snaps active. 8 On the Options Bar. Under Modify Subcategories. expand Lines. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 2 Close the Project Browser. 9 Beginning at the transformer. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. enter Electrical Power.

as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 3mm. 11 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 On the Options Bar. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 29 Click Modify. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 28 Click above the cap. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and select 1. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 While pressing Ctrl.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 3. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. Using the same method. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.0. enter 7. and press Enter. and then press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. You enter exact values for each line length.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. for Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 12. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. change the length of the bottom line to 3. Press Esc. click on the length dimension value. you can ensure that they stay together. 40 Press Esc.

46 In the Project Browser. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. enter Ground. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 51 Using the method learned previously. for Name. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. TP-2B.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click OK. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select all 3 lines. while pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 54 Select the group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 52 Select the detail group. 47 In the drawing area. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 50 With the group selected.

59 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and will place it on sheet E01. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

and then click the corner where the Top. and click Rename. click Home. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the section box. Back. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Apply View Template.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 5 Right-click the copy. 8 On the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and double click Typical Make Up Air. Walkthroughs. and Left sides converge. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. 4 In the Project Browser. select 3D Views. click Training Files. for Name. 2 Zoom in to view the section.rvt. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and then press Esc. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 6 In the Rename View dialog.

and click to specify the second leader point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. select 3D HVAC Iso. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Move the cursor down and to the left. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). 15 Using the same method.■ ■ Under Names. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Click OK. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

and under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. as shown. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.18 Press Esc. under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. To rotate and reposition a text label. 19 Complete the text labels. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 23 Click on the crop region.

Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Place a detail component. Use detail lines to create a detail group. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 In the Instance Properties. and click Activate View. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and click Deactivate View. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and under Extents. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. 33 Right-click the view. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 30 On the View Control Bar.rvt. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. scroll down. click Training Files.25 Click OK. 29 Right click the view. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop View and Section Box.

Click OK. select Documentation. 13 In the drawing area. for Sub-Discipline. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Scale. as the rectangle start point. right-click the view name. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 9 Zoom in to the component. select Plumbing. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 12 On the Element panel. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Click OK. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. For View Classification. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select 1 : 5.

I. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 21 In the drawing area.P. select C. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 18 With the filled region still selected. and then press Esc. and click OK. Concrete. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. for Type. 22 Click Modify.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 20 Select 1. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down.

and then click to select them. 31 On the Options Bar. 23 In the drawing area. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. (Line). click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 28 Click Modify. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 34 Press Esc. select the filled region. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.

and then select the side of the slab above the line. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then press Esc. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.

358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain. and then click to select them. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 49 Click Modify. 45 Using the method learned previously. 52 In the Create Group dialog. for Name. and click OK..D. select the Flashing Membrane group. enter Flashing Membrane_F. draw wide detail lines as shown. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. (Rectangle). 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

as shown. 55 Press Esc.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. press Spacebar twice. as shown.

Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.62 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Leader and Free End. 64 Press Esc twice.

81 Select the text note. and then click OK. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 76 To select the leader start point.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select 15000 (Division 15 . 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).70 In the Keynotes dialog. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 71 Click Modify.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 72 If necessary. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the second leader point.

as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail.

90 Press Esc. and then press Esc twice. open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the view title. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful